blob: 08a532c770868e0790f784545176d70349a36213 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar2e693a82019-10-16 22:35:02 +02001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.1. Last change: 2019 Oct 04
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar2e693a82019-10-16 22:35:02 +020063are in the "/usr/vim/vim81/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim81". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings. This
70allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
82NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
83The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
84file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is
85automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
220To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must
221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
479 *g:html_number_lines*
480Default: current 'number' setting.
481When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
482When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
483highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
484Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
485 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
486Force to omit the line numbers: >
487 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
488Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
489 :unlet g:html_number_lines
490<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200491 *g:html_line_ids*
492Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
493When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
494inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
495takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
496pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
497view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200498(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200499javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
500For example: >
501
502 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
503 page.html#123 does the same
504
505 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
506 diff.html#42 does the same
507<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200508 *g:html_use_css*
509Default: 1.
510When 1, generate valid HTML 4.01 markup with CSS1 styling, supported in all
511modern browsers and most old browsers.
512When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
513recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
514forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
515Example: >
516 :let g:html_use_css = 0
517<
518 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
519Default: 0.
520When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
521from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
522value of 'conceallevel'.
523When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
524|conceal|ed.
525
526Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
527included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
528 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
529 :setl conceallevel=0
530<
531 *g:html_ignore_folding*
532Default: 0.
533When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
534Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
535the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
536When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
537text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
538
539Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
540in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
541 zR
542 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
543<
544 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
545Default: 0.
546When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
547When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
548in Vim.
549
550Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
551regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
552
553This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
554>
555 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
556<
557 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
558Default: 0.
559When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
560Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
561open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
562'foldcolumn' setting.
563When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
564folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
565>
566 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
567<
568 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
569Default: empty string.
570This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
571when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
572for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
573line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
574affected in this way as follows:
575 f: fold column
576 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
577 t: fold text
578 d: diff filler
579
580Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
581 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
582<
583This feature is currently implemented by inserting read-only <input> elements
584into the markup to contain the uncopyable areas. This does not work well in
585all cases. When pasting to some applications which understand HTML, the
586<input> elements also get pasted. But plain-text paste destinations should
587always work.
588
589 *g:html_no_invalid*
590Default: 0.
591When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, an invalid attribute is
592intentionally inserted into the <input> element for the uncopyable areas. This
593increases the number of applications you can paste to without also pasting the
594<input> elements. Specifically, Microsoft Word will not paste the <input>
595elements if they contain this invalid attribute.
596When 1, no invalid markup is ever intentionally inserted, and the generated
597page should validate. However, be careful pasting into Microsoft Word when
598|g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty; it can be hard to get rid of the <input>
599elements which get pasted.
600
601 *g:html_hover_unfold*
602Default: 0.
603When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
604|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
605When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
606cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
607disabled javascript to view the folded text.
608
609Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
610feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
611normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
612they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
613>
614 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
615<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200616 *g:html_id_expr*
617Default: ""
618Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
619to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
620longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
621evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
622so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
623larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
624
625 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
626<
627To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
628
629 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
630<
631Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
632evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
633windows.
634
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200635 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
636Default: current 'wrap' setting.
637When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
638not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
639When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
640used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
641window.
642Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
643 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
644Explicitly disable wrapping: >
645 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
646Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
647 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
648<
649 *g:html_no_pre*
650Default: 0.
651When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
652tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
653characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
654When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
655used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
656references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
657text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
658old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
659the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
660>
661 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
662<
663 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100664Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
665 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
666 1 otherwise.
667When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200668number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100669When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200670are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
671allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
672the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
673indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
674
675Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
676 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
677<
678Force tabs to be expanded: >
679 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
680<
681 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
682It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
683|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
684
685If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
686for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
687'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
688set to match the chosen document encoding.
689
690Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
691|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
692wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
693encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
694below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
695
696Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
697the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
698
699 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
700 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
701
702 *g:html_use_encoding*
703Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
704To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
705name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
706something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
707webserver: >
708 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
709You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
710entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
711 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
712To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
713variable: >
714 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
715<
716 *g:html_encoding_override*
717Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
718 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
719This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
720specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
721list of conversions.
722
723This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
724pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
725
726Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
727 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
728<
729 *g:html_charset_override*
730Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
731 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
732 browser support.
733This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
734'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
735use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
736TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
737and UTF-32 instead, use: >
738 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
739
740Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
741compatibility problems with some major browsers.
742
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200743 *g:html_font*
744Default: "monospace"
745You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
746g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
747surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
748item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
749way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
750result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
751Examples: >
752
753 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
754 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
755
756 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
757 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
758<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200759 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
760Default: 0.
761When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
762When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
763>
764 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
765<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100766==============================================================================
7675. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
768
769 *b:current_syntax-variable*
770Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
771"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
772settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
773 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
774 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
775 :au BufReadPost * endif
776
777
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000778
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000779ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000780
781ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
782any value to the respective variable. Example: >
783 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
784To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
785 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
786
787Variable Highlight ~
788abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
789abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
790
791
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000792ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000793
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000794See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000795
796
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000797ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000798
799The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000800by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000801by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000802and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000803
804 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
805
806will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
807
808 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
809 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
810 ]]></script>
811
812See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
813
814
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000815APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000816
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100817The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
818version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000819
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000820
821 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000822ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
823 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000824
825Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
826doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
827startup vimrc: >
828 :let filetype_i = "asm"
829Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
830
831There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
832extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
833line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
834files are included:
835 asm GNU assembly (the default)
836 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
837 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
838 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
839 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
840 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
841 nasm Netwide assembly
842 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
843 MMX)
844 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
845
846The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100847 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000848Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100849one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200850immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
851equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
852between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
853particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
854highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000855
856The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
857b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000858 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000859
860If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
861the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
862language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000863 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000864
865As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
866
867
868Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
869
870To enable a feature: >
871 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
872To disable a feature: >
873 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
874
875Variable Highlight ~
876nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
877 (parser dependent; not recommended)
878nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
879nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
880
881
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000882ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000883
884*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
885hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
886using. For Perl script use: >
887 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
888 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
889For Visual Basic use: >
890 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
891 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
892
893
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000894BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000895
896The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
897for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
898are supported.
899
900Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
901in ones |.vimrc|: >
902 let baan_code_stds=1
903
904*baan-folding*
905
906Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
907mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
908source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
909
910To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
911 let baan_fold=1
912Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
913indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
914considered equal to a tab). >
915 let baan_fold_block=1
916Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000917SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000918match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
919 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000920Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000921the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
922.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
923 set foldminlines=5
924 set foldnestmax=6
925
926
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000927BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000928
929Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
930which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
931five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
932otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
933Basic.
934
935
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000936C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000937
938A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
939to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000940 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000941To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
942 :unlet c_comment_strings
943
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100944An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
945 :set filetype=cpp
946
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000947Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200948*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
949*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
950*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
951*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
952*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
953*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
954*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000955 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200956 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
957 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200958*c_curly_error* highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000959 start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200960*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
961*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
962*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
963*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
964*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200965 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200966*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
967*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
968*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
969*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
970*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000971
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000972When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
973become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
974 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +0000975"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
976 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000977
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000978If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
979when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
980to a larger number: >
981 :let c_minlines = 100
982This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
983displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
984disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
985
986When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
987works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
988you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
989
990To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
991Example: >
992 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
993 :function MyCadd()
994 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
995 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
996 : hi link cMyItem Title
997 :endfun
998
999ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1000"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1001not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1002highlighting: >
1003 :hi link cConstant NONE
1004
1005If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1006highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1007
1008If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001009in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001011 syn sync fromstart
1012 set foldmethod=syntax
1013
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001014CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001015
1016C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1017the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1018
1019By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1020of C or C++: >
1021 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1022
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001023
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001024CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001025
1026Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1027that are available. Additionally there is:
1028
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001029chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1030chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1031chill_minlines like c_minlines
1032
1033
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001034CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001035
1036ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1037If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1038 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1039This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1040"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1041file).
1042
1043You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1044 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1045Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1046 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1047This works immediately.
1048
1049
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001050CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1051
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001052The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1053*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1054value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1055identifiers:
1056>
1057 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1058 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1059 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1060 \ }
1061<
1062Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1063
1064If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1065language constants and special forms are matched.
1066
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001067Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1068Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1069using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1070
1071Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1072bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1073
1074This option is off by default.
1075>
1076 " Default
1077 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1078<
1079
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001080COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001081
1082COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1083development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1084versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1085add this line to your .vimrc: >
1086 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1087To disable it again, use this: >
1088 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1089
1090
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001091COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001092
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001093The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001094comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1095
1096 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1097
1098The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1099
1100
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001101CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1102
1103Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1104
1105Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001106cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001107cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001108
1109
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001110CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001111
1112This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1113used.
1114
1115Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1116symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1117between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001118"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1119>
1120 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121
1122For using tcsh: >
1123
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001124 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001125
1126Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1127tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001128will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001129"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1130variable.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001133CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001134
1135Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001136hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001137or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001138normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001139line to your .vimrc file: >
1140
1141 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1142
1143Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1144
1145 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1146
1147To disable these again, use this: >
1148
1149 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1150 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1151<
1152
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001153CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001154
1155Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1156doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1157startup vimrc: >
1158 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1159
1160
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001161DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001162
1163Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001164according to freedesktop.org standard:
1165http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001166But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001167highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001168to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: >
1169 :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1
1170
1171
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001172DIFF *diff.vim*
1173
1174The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1175there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1176
1177 :let diff_translations = 0
1178
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001179Also see |diff-slow|.
1180
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001181
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001182DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001183
1184The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1185provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1186the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1187versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1188uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1189line to your startup file: >
1190 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1191
1192
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001193DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001194DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1195DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001196
1197There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1198are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1199automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1200defaults to XML.
1201You can set the type manually: >
1202 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1203or: >
1204 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1205You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1206Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1207 :set filetype=docbksgml
1208or: >
1209 :set filetype=docbkxml
1210
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001211You can specify the DocBook version: >
1212 :let docbk_ver = 3
1213When not set 4 is used.
1214
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001215
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001216DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001217
1218There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1219extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1220is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1221this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1222Select the version you want with the following line: >
1223
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001224 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001225
1226If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1227Windows 2000.
1228
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001229A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001230"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1231is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001232
1233 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1234
1235If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1236
1237
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001238DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1239
1240Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001241(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1242idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001243
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001244There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1245explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1246Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001247 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1248or >
1249 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1250
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001251It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1252the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1253adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001254 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1255
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001256There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001257are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1258
1259Variable Default Effect ~
1260g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1261g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1262 doxygen comments.
1263
1264doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1265 and html_my_rendering underline.
1266
1267doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1268 colour highlighting.
1269
1270doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001271 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001272
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001273There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001274configuration.
1275
1276Highlight Effect ~
1277doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1278 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1279doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1280 \endlink from a \link section.
1281
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001282
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001283DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001284
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001285The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001286case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1287
1288 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1289
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001290The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001291this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1292
1293 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1294
1295before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1296Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1297'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1298Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1299highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001300delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001301
1302 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1303
1304The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1305
1306
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001307EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001308
1309While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001310syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1311highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001312highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1313
1314 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1315
1316Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1317
1318Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1319
1320 :let eiffel_strict=1
1321 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1322
1323Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1324five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1325"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1326
1327Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1328guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1329lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1330
1331If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1332"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1333
1334 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1335
1336instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1337
1338Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1339experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1340
1341 :let eiffel_ise=1
1342
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001343Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001344
1345 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1346
1347to your startup file.
1348
1349
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001350EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1351
1352Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
1353version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
1354Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1355
1356Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1357for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
1358(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1359
1360The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1361
1362 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1363 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1364
1365To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
1366auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1367add the following line to your startup file: >
1368
1369 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
1370
1371 or
1372
1373 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
1374
1375
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001376ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001377
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001378Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001379the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001380
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001381The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1382put the following line in your vimrc: >
1383
1384 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1385
1386To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1387
1388 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001389
1390
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001391FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1392
1393FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001394NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1395development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001396
1397Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1398syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1399editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1400start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1401'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1402(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1403and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1404
1405If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1406move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1407 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1408
1409
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001410FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001411
1412The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1413modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001414following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001415J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1416
1417If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1418redefine the following syntax groups:
1419
1420 - formConditional
1421 - formNumber
1422 - formStatement
1423 - formHeaderStatement
1424 - formComment
1425 - formPreProc
1426 - formDirective
1427 - formType
1428 - formString
1429
1430Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1431directives per default in the same syntax group.
1432
1433A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001434header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001435this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1436
1437 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1438
1439The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001440gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001441conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1442
1443
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001444FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001445
1446Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001447Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001448should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1449almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001450
1451Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001452Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001453syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1454
1455When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001456form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001457 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001458in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001459form, then >
1460 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1461in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1462
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001463If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1464extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1465file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1466will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1467on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001468
1469When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1470source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001471fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001472neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001473determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1474using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1475compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1476free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1477columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1478are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1479algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1480file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1481incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1482just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001483of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001484
1485Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001486Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001487fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001488Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1489using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001490variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1491 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001492placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001493mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1494
1495Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1496If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1497fortran_fold with a command such as >
1498 :let fortran_fold=1
1499to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1500is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001501subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001502also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1503 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1504then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001505case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001506fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1507 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1508then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001509lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001510
1511If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1512fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001513you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001514units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1515unit.
1516
1517More precise fortran syntax ~
1518If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1519 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001520then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001521statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1522recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1523construct.
1524
1525Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001526The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1527find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1528deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1529items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001530
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001531If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1532other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001533that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001534
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001535The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1536the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1537to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1538fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1539ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001540
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001541If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1542set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1543ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1544an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1545contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001546 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1547 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001548 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001549 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001550 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001551 endif
1552Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1553precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1554
1555Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001556the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1557by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1558f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1559files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1560identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1561Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001562 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001563
1564For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1565now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1566silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001567instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001568
1569The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1570comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1571non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1572or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001573items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001574
1575Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001576Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1577strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001578because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1579
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001580For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1581|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001582
1583
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001584FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001585
1586In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1587the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1588appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1589patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1590number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1591
1592For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1593as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1594
1595 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1596 \ set filetype=fvwm
1597
1598If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1599find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1600"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1601in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1602
1603 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1604
1605to your .vimrc file.
1606
1607
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001608GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001609
1610The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1611the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1612is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1613are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1614
1615 htmlString
1616 htmlValue
1617 htmlEndTag
1618 htmlTag
1619 htmlTagN
1620
1621Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1622java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1623group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1624correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1625to the contains clause.
1626
1627The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1628group to make them easier to see.
1629
1630
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001631GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001632
1633The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001634under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001635of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1636filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1637(see |filetype.txt|).
1638
1639
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001640HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001641
1642The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001643Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001644syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1645
1646If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1647light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1648 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1649To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1650add: >
1651 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1652To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1653 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1654And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1655 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1656If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1657your .vimrc: >
1658 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1659
1660The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1661directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001662directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1663operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001664as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1665 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1666
1667The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1668automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1669TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001670or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001671in your .vimrc >
1672 :let lhs_markup = none
1673for no highlighting at all, or >
1674 :let lhs_markup = tex
1675to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1676For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1677this variable, so e.g. >
1678 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001679will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001680set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1681loading a file.
1682
1683
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001684HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001685
1686The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1687
1688The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1689This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
1690closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
1691defined for you)
1692
1693Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1694names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1695makes it easy to spot errors
1696
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001697Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001698names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1699
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001700Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001701are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1702text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1703while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001704only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001705<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001706
1707If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1708following syntax groups:
1709
1710 - htmlBold
1711 - htmlBoldUnderline
1712 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1713 - htmlUnderline
1714 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1715 - htmlItalic
1716 - htmlTitle for titles
1717 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1718
1719To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1720of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1721following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1722are read during initialization) >
1723 :let html_my_rendering=1
1724
1725If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1726http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1727
1728You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1729vimrc file: >
1730 :let html_no_rendering=1
1731
1732HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1733details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1734However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001735ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001736 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1737
1738JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1739'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001740programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001741supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1742
1743Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1744
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001745There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1746written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001747following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1748(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001749>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001750 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1751 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1752
1753Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1754the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1755
1756
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001757HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001758
1759The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1760
1761Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1762doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1763this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1764different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1765 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1766
1767Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1768
1769Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1770signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1771a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1772 :set syntax=htmlos
1773
1774Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1775block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1776
1777
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001778IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001779
1780Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1781how to recognize this filetype.
1782
1783To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1784 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1785
1786
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001787INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001788
1789Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1790most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1791to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1792 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1793
1794By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1795and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1796you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1797need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1798 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1799
1800This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1801set of highlighted system functions.
1802
1803The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1804it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1805by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1806startup sequence: >
1807 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1808
1809By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1810version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1811Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1812startup sequence: >
1813 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1814
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001815IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1816
1817IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1818Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1819
1820IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1821rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001822repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001823
1824There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1825are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1826
1827The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1828
1829Variable Effect ~
1830
1831idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1832 extensions
1833idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1834idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1835 quite helpful)
1836idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1837
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001838
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001839JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001840
1841The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1842
1843In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1844flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001845classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001846way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1847 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1848
1849All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1850highlight them use: >
1851 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1852
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001853You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001854download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1855If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1856use the following: >
1857 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1858Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1859
1860Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001861how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001862functions:
1863
1864If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1865a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1866 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1867However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1868supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1869 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1870If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1871declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1872definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1873original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1874
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001875In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001876only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001877statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001878your startup file: >
1879 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1880The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001881characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001882new highlightings for the following groups.:
1883 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1884which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001885strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001886have opted to chose another background for those statements.
1887
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001888Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1889creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1890similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1891and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001892 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1893 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1894 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1895 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1896 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001897 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001898 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1899To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1900 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1901
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001902If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1903can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1904scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1905actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1906CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001907 :let java_javascript=1
1908 :let java_css=1
1909 :let java_vb=1
1910
1911In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1912for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1913 :hi link javaParen Comment
1914or >
1915 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1916
1917If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1918when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1919to a larger number: >
1920 :let java_minlines = 50
1921This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1922displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1923number is that redrawing can become slow.
1924
1925
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02001926JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
1927
1928The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
1929default. To disable concealment: >
1930 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
1931
1932To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
1933 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
1934
1935
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001936LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001937
1938Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
1939style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
1940define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
1941 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
1942
1943
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001944LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001945
1946Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
1947gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
1948 :syn sync minlines=300
1949may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
1950difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
1951
1952
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02001953LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
1954
1955To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
1956
1957 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
1958<
1959
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00001960LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
1961
1962The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
1963
1964 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
1965 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
1966 Useful for AutoLisp.
1967 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
1968 of parenthesization will receive different
1969 highlighting.
1970<
1971The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
1972the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
1973colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
1974specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02001975usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00001976highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
1977
1978
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001979LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001980
1981There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
1982
1983If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
1984
1985 :let lite_sql_query = 1
1986
1987For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
1988set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
1989
1990 :let lite_minlines = 200
1991
1992
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001993LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001994
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02001995LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001996file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
1997users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
1998should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
1999
2000 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2001
2002If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2003modeline. For a LPC file:
2004
2005 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2006
2007For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2008
2009 // vim:set ft=c:
2010
2011If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2012
2013There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002014used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002015and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002016assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002017you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2018
2019 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2020
2021For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2022
2023 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2024
2025For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2026
2027 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2028
2029For uLPC series of LPC:
2030uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2031instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2032
2033
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002034LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002035
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002036The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002037the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2038lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010020395.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002040
2041 :let lua_version = 5
2042 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002043
2044
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002045MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002046
2047Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002048quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002049signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2050whitespaces and end with a newline.
2051
2052Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002053as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002054only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2055
2056By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002057displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002058with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2059
2060 :let mail_minlines = 30
2061
2062
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002063MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002064
2065In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2066errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2067feature off by using: >
2068
2069 :let make_no_commands = 1
2070
2071
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002072MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002073
2074Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2075supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2076The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2077highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2078
2079 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2080
2081to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2082choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
20831, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2084$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2085
2086 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2087 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2088 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2089 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2090 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2091 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2092 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2093 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2094 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2095
2096
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002097MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002098
2099Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2100have the following in your .vimrc: >
2101
2102 let filetype_m = "mma"
2103
2104
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002105MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002106
2107If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2108highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2109comments: >
2110
2111 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2112
2113To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2114
2115 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2116
2117To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2118'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2119
2120 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2121
2122Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2123
2124 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2125
2126To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2127
2128 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2129
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002130Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002131use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2132To enable this option: >
2133
2134 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2135
2136An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2137
2138 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2139
2140
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002141MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002142
2143There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2144
2145If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2146
2147 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2148
2149For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2150set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2151
2152 :let msql_minlines = 200
2153
2154
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002155N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2156
2157N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2158Couchbase Server databases.
2159
2160Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2161and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2162many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2163
2164
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002165NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002166
2167There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2168
2169If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2170errors, use this: >
2171
2172 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2173
2174If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2175
2176
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002177NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002178
2179The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2180activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2181can use them.
2182
2183For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002184processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002185features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >
2186
2187 :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1
2188
2189Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2190Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2191there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002192you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002193can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2194native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2195\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2196accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2197environments.
2198
2199In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2200follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2201
22021. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2203
22042. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2205 exclamation mark, etc.
2206
22073. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2208 carriage return.
2209
2210The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2211algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2212
2213Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2214furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2215vertical space input will be output as is.
2216
2217Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2218than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2219practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002220marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002221need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002222spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2223
2224 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2225
2226Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2227with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2228highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002229"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002230
2231 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2232 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2233 \ gui=reverse,bold
2234
2235If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2236with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2237file: >
2238
2239 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2240
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002241As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002242paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2243
2244Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2245groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2246
2247
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002248OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002249
2250The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2251.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2252
2253 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2254
2255you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2256by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2257
2258 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2259
2260prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2261contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2262
2263
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002264PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002265
2266The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml
2267and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002268as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2269sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002270you set the variable: >
2271
2272 :let papp_include_html=1
2273
2274in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2275sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002276edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002277
2278The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2279http://papp.plan9.de.
2280
2281
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002282PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002283
2284Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection
2285doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
2286startup vimrc: >
2287
2288 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2289
2290The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2291provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002292Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002293enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2294following line to your startup file: >
2295
2296 :let pascal_traditional=1
2297
2298To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2299keywords, etc): >
2300
2301 :let pascal_delphi=1
2302
2303
2304The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2305*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2306operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2307
2308 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2309
2310Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2311
2312 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2313
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002314Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002315pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2316match Turbo Pascal. >
2317
2318 :let pascal_gpc=1
2319
2320or >
2321
2322 :let pascal_fpc=1
2323
2324To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2325pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2326
2327 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2328
2329If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2330will be highlighted as Error. >
2331
2332 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2333
2334
2335
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002336PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002337
2338There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2339
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002340Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2341to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2342files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002343
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002344 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002345
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002346To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002347off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002348
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002349To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2350from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002351
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002352 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002353
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002354(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2355enabled it.)
2356
2357If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2358
2359 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2360
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002361(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002362
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002363The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2364highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002365perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2366
2367 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2368 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2369 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2370
2371(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2372
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002373The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002374synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2375If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002376then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002377out the line that causes the mistake.
2378
2379One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2380
2381 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2382 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2383
2384Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2385its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2386
2387 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2388
2389If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2390
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002391 :let perl_fold = 1
2392
2393If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2394
2395 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002396
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002397Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2398this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002399
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002400 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002401
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002402Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2403via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002404
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002405 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2406
2407Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2408behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2409
2410 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002411
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002412PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002413
2414[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2415it has been renamed to "php"]
2416
2417There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2418
2419If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2420
2421 let php_sql_query = 1
2422
2423For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2424
2425 let php_baselib = 1
2426
2427Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2428
2429 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2430
2431Using the old colorstyle: >
2432
2433 let php_oldStyle = 1
2434
2435Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2436
2437 let php_asp_tags = 1
2438
2439Disable short tags: >
2440
2441 let php_noShortTags = 1
2442
2443For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2444
2445 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2446
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002447For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002448one: >
2449
2450 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2451
2452Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2453
2454 let php_folding = 1
2455
2456Selecting syncing method: >
2457
2458 let php_sync_method = x
2459
2460x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2461x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2462x = 0 to sync from start.
2463
2464
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002465PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2466
2467TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2468variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002469see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002470
2471This syntax file has the option >
2472
2473 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2474
2475if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2476
2477
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002478PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002479
2480PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2481
2482This syntax file has the options:
2483
2484- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002485 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002486
2487 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002488 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002489
2490 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2491 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2492 continuation symbols
2493
2494 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2495
2496- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2497 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2498
2499
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002500PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002501
2502There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2503
2504If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2505
2506 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2507
2508For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2509set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2510
2511 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2512
2513
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002514POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002515
2516There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2517
2518First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2519currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2520and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2521Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2522extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2523level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2524highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2525
2526 :let postscr_level=2
2527
2528If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2529the most prevalent version currently.
2530
2531Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2532particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2533PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2534
2535If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2536Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2537follows: >
2538
2539 :let postscr_display=1
2540
2541If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2542Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2543postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2544
2545 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2546
2547PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2548useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2549cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2550character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2551explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2552highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2553
2554 :let postscr_fonts=1
2555 :let postscr_encodings=1
2556
2557There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2558PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2559operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2560if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2561operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2562or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2563highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2564postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2565
2566 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2567<
2568
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002569 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2570PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002571
2572This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2573
2574In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2575the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2576appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2577patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2578"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2579
2580For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2581files, add the following: >
2582
2583 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2584 \ set filetype=ptcap
2585
2586If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2587are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2588internal variable to a larger number: >
2589
2590 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2591
2592(The default is 20 lines.)
2593
2594
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002595PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002596
2597Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2598doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2599startup vimrc: >
2600 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2601The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2602Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2603 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2604 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2605
2606
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002607PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002608
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002609There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002610
2611For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002612 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002613
2614For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002615 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002616
2617For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002618 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2619
2620For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2621 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2622or >
2623 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2624(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002625
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002626For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002627 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002628
2629If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002630preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002631 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2632
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002633Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002634 1 above with anything.
2635
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002636QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002637
2638The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002639Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002640a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the
2641syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002642users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002643can be set for the following effects:
2644
2645set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2646 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2647
2648set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2649 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2650
2651set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2652 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2653
2654Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2655commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2656
2657
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002658R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2659
2660The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2661can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2662 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2663
2664You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2665 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2666
2667enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2668braces: >
2669 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2670
2671and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2672 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2673
2674
2675R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2676
2677To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2678 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2679
2680To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2681 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2682
2683To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2684 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2685
2686By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2687language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2688you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2689`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2690you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2691 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2692
2693
2694R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2695
2696To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2697 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2698
2699
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002700READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002701
2702The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002703few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002704items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2705command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2706 let readline_has_bash = 1
2707
2708This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2709later, and part earlier) adds.
2710
2711
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002712RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2713
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002714Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2715select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2716syntax list.
2717
2718To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002719 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002720
2721To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2722`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2723 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
2724 \ 'cpp' = ['cpp', 'c++'],
2725 \ 'bash' = ['bash', 'sh'],
2726 ...
2727 }
2728
2729To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2730 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2731
2732To enable folding of sections: >
2733 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2734
2735Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2736
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002737
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002738REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002739
2740If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2741when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2742to a larger number: >
2743 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2744This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2745displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2746number is that redrawing can become slow.
2747
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002748Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2749comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2750your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2751>
2752 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2753
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002754
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002755RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002756
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002757 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2758 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2759 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2760 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2761 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2762
2763 *ruby_operators*
2764 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2765
2766Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2767
2768 :let ruby_operators = 1
2769<
2770 *ruby_space_errors*
2771 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2772
2773Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2774
2775 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2776<
2777This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2778as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2779"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2780spaces respectively.
2781
2782 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2783 Ruby: Folding ~
2784
2785Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2786
2787 :let ruby_fold = 1
2788<
2789This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2790buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2791filetypes.
2792
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002793Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2794"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2795
2796You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2797
2798 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2799<
2800The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2801
2802 keyword meaning ~
2803 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2804 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2805 NONE Nothing
2806 if "if" or "unless" block
2807 def "def" block
2808 class "class" block
2809 module "module" block
2810 do "do" block
2811 begin "begin" block
2812 case "case" block
2813 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2814 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2815 [ Array literal
2816 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2817 / Regexp
2818 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2819 : Symbol
2820 # Multiline comment
2821 << Here documents
2822 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2823
2824 *ruby_no_expensive*
2825 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002826
2827By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002828of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002829experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2830you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002831
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002832 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002833<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002834In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2835
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002836 *ruby_minlines*
2837
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002838If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2839scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2840the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002841
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002842 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002843<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002844Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2845largest class or module.
2846
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002847 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2848 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002849
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002850Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2851"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002852
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002853 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002854<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002855
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002856SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002857
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002858By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002859
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002860scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2861Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002862
2863
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002864SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002865
2866The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2867of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2868
2869The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2870case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002871used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002872highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2873 :let sdl_2000=1
2874
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002875This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002876keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2877 :let SDL_no_96=1
2878
2879
2880The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2881satisfied with it for my own projects.
2882
2883
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002884SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002885
2886To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2887highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2888
2889 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2890
2891in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2892inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2893by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2894also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2895you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2896
2897Bugs:
2898
2899 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2900 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2901 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2902 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2903 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2904 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2905
2906
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002907SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002908
2909The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2910
2911The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2912This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2913closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2914defined for you)
2915
2916Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
2917names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
2918
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002919Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002920names are colored differently than unknown ones.
2921
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002922Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002923are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
2924text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
2925<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
2926
2927If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
2928following syntax groups:
2929
2930 - sgmlBold
2931 - sgmlBoldItalic
2932 - sgmlUnderline
2933 - sgmlItalic
2934 - sgmlLink for links
2935
2936To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
2937following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
2938are read during initialization) >
2939 let sgml_my_rendering=1
2940
2941You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
2942vimrc file: >
2943 let sgml_no_rendering=1
2944
2945(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
2946
2947
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002948 *ft-posix-synax* *ft-dash-syntax*
2949SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002950
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002951This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
2952shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002953
2954Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02002955various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002956
2957 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
2958 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
2959<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02002960See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
2961cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
2962/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
2963that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
2964shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
2965symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002966
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002967One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002968variables in your <.vimrc>:
2969
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002970 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002971 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002972< posix: (using this is the nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002973 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002974< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002975 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00002976< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00002977 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002978
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002979< (dash users should use posix)
2980
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00002981If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
2982default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00002983the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
2984statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002985sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00002986
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00002987The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
2988
2989 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
2990 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
2991 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
2992 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002993>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002994then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00002995syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
2996to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002997
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00002998 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
2999
3000If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3001when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003002to a larger number. Example: >
3003
3004 let sh_minlines = 500
3005
3006This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3007displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3008number is that redrawing can become slow.
3009
3010If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3011reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3012
3013 let sh_maxlines = 100
3014<
3015The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3016speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3017
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003018syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3019extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3020for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3021the following line in your .vimrc: >
3022
3023 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3024<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003025
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003026 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3027 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003028
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003029You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3030Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3031file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3032
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003033 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003034 " ==============
3035 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3036 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3037 unlet b:current_syntax
3038 endif
3039 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3040 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3041 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3042 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3043 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3044<
3045This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3046 awk '...awk code here...'
3047be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3048extended to other languages.
3049
3050
3051SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3052(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003053
3054The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3055
3056- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3057 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3058 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3059
3060- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3061 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003062 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003063 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3064 them in the syntax file.
3065
3066- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3067 highlighting of # style comments.
3068
3069 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3070 number of #s.
3071
3072 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003073 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003074
3075 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3076 more than one #.
3077
3078Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003079PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003080fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3081the syntax file.
3082
3083
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003084SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3085 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003086 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003087
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003088While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3089custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3090SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003091
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003092Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3093scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3094supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3095buffer by buffer basis.
3096
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003097For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003098
3099
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003100TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003101
3102This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3103for how the filetype is detected.
3104
3105Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003106is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003107this line to your .vimrc: >
3108
3109 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3110
3111If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3112when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3113to a larger number: >
3114
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003115 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003116
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003117This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3118displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3119synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3120tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3121redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003122
3123
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003124TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003125
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003126 Tex Contents~
3127 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3128 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3129 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3130 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3131 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3132 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3133 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3134 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3135 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3136 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3137 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3138 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3139 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003140 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003141
3142 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003143 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003144
3145As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3146sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3147 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3148in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3149modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3150 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003151If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003152 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003153<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003154 *g:tex_nospell*
3155 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3156
3157If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3158 let g:tex_nospell=1
3159into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3160comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3161
3162 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003163 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003164
3165Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3166prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3167this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3168 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003169If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3170see |g:tex_nospell|.
3171
3172 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003173 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003174
3175Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3176one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3177want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3178 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003179<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003180 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003181 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003182
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003183The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3184highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3185texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3186terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3187as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003188special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3189 %stopzone
3190which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3191texMathZone.
3192
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003193 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003194 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003195
3196If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3197 :syn sync maxlines=200
3198 :syn sync minlines=50
3199(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003200increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003201if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3202
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003203Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3204|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3205
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003206 *g:tex_fast*
3207
3208Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3209
3210 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3211
3212in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3213highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3214synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3215price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3216folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3217
3218You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3219selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3220
3221 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3222 c : allow texComment syntax
3223 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3224 M : allow texMath syntax
3225 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3226 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3227 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3228 S : allow texStyle syntax
3229 v : allow verbatim syntax
3230 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3231<
3232As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3233but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003234(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003235
3236 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003237 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003238
3239LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3240of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3241package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3242it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3243techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003244by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3245which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3246http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003247
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003248I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3249
3250 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3251<
3252The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3253
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003254 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003255 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003256
3257The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3258although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3259errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3260you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003261 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003262and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003263
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003264 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003265 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003266
3267If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3268code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003269 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3270You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3271(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3272As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3273 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3274You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3275and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3276The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3277has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003278
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003279 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003280 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003281
3282One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3283commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3284following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3285such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3286
3287 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3288 :set ft=tex
3289
3290Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3291always accept such use of @.
3292
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003293 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003294 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003295
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003296If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3297number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3298including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3299superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3300superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3301In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3302
3303One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3304with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003305
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003306 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003307 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3308
3309You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003310<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3311for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003312
3313 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003314 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003315 d = delimiters
3316 m = math symbols
3317 g = Greek
3318 s = superscripts/subscripts
3319<
3320By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3321substitution will not be made.
3322
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003323 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3324 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3325
3326Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3327keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3328syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3329
3330 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3331 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3332 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003333 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003334 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3335 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3336 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003337 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003338
3339 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3340 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3341
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003342 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3343 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3344
3345 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3346
3347 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3348 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3349
3350 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3351 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3352 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3353 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3354
3355 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3356 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3357<
3358 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3359 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3360 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3361< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3362 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3363
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003364
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003365TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003366
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003367There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3368
3369For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3370set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3371
3372 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3373<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003374VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3375 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003376There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003377updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3378g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3379improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003380
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003381 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3382 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3383<
3384 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3385 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003386
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003387 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3388The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3389embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003390
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003391 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3392 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003393 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3394 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3395 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3396 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3397 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003398<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003399By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3400itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3401of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3402and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003403 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003404
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003405Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003406
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003407 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3408 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3409 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003410 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003411 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3412 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3413 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3414 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3415 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003416<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003417 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003418Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3419is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003420highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003421
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003422 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3423<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003424
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003425
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003426XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003427
3428The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3429variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3430You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3431xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3432your .vimrc. Example: >
3433 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3434When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3435
3436Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3437"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3438highlighted.
3439
3440
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003441XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003442
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003443Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003444setting a global variable: >
3445
3446 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3447<
3448 *xml-folding*
3449The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003450start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003451
3452 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3453 :set foldmethod=syntax
3454
3455Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3456especially for large files.
3457
3458
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003459X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003460
3461xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3462XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3463you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3464
3465To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3466somewhere else with "P".
3467
3468Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3469 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003470 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003471 : echo c
3472 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3473 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3474 :endfunction
3475 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3476 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3477This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3478It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3479must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3480
3481It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3482 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3483
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003484
3485YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3486
3487 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
3488A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3489non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3490plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3491and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3492integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
3493will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3494
3495Schema Description ~
3496failsafe No additional highlighting.
3497json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3498core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
3499pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3500 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3501 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
3502 schema.
3503
3504Default schema is `core`.
3505
3506Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3507only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
3508difference defined in the syntax file.
3509
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003510
3511ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3512
3513The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3514
3515 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3516
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003517==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010035186. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003519
3520Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3521
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035221. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003523 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3524 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3525 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3526 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3527 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3528
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035292. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003530 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3531
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035323. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003533 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3534 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3535 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3536
3537Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3538you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3539to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3540and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3541"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3542one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3543This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3544each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3545for a lot of groups.
3546
3547Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3548group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3549for the syntax group with the same name.
3550
3551In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3552defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3553using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3554match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3555keyword with ignoring case.
3556
3557
3558PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3559
3560When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3561
35621. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3563 defined last has priority.
35642. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
35653. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3566 start in later positions.
3567
3568
3569DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3570
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003571:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003572 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3573 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3574 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3575 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3576
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003577:sy[ntax] case
3578 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003579
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003580SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3581
3582:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3583 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3584 in a syntax item:
3585
3586 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3587 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3588 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3589
3590 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3591 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3592 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3593
3594 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3595
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003596:sy[ntax] spell
3597 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3598 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3599
3600
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003601SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3602
3603:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3604 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3605 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3606
3607 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3608 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
3609 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
3610
3611 Example: >
3612 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3613<
3614 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3615 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3616 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3617
3618 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3619
3620 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003621 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003622 match.
3623
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003624 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3625 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003626 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003627
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003628DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3629
3630:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3631
3632 This defines a number of keywords.
3633
3634 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3635 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3636 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3637
3638 Example: >
3639 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3640<
3641 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3642 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3643 These examples do exactly the same: >
3644 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3645 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3646 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003647< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003648 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3649 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3650 variations at once: >
3651 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3652<
3653 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3654 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3655 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3656 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3657 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003658 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003659
3660 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3661 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3662 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3663
3664 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3665 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3666 instead.
3667
3668 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3669
3670 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3671 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3672 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003673 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003674 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3675 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3676< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3677 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3678 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3679
3680
3681DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3682
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003683:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3684 [excludenl]
3685 [keepend]
3686 {pattern}
3687 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003688
3689 This defines one match.
3690
3691 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3692 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3693 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3694 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3695 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003696 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3697 match with the end pattern. See
3698 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003699 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3700 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3701 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3702 line, which makes the match depend on where
3703 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3704 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3705
3706 Example (match a character constant): >
3707 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3708<
3709
3710DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3711 *E398* *E399*
3712:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3713 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3714 [keepend]
3715 [extend]
3716 [excludenl]
3717 start={start_pattern} ..
3718 [skip={skip_pattern}]
3719 end={end_pattern} ..
3720 [{options}]
3721
3722 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3723
3724 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3725 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3726 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3727 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3728 for the text in between the matched start and
3729 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3730 a different group for the start or end match.
3731 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3732 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3733 match with the end pattern. See
3734 |:syn-keepend|.
3735 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003736 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003737 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3738 extend a containing match or item. Only
3739 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3740 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
3741 start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
3742 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3743 skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
3744 the region where not to look for the end
3745 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3746 end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
3747 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3748
3749 Example: >
3750 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3751<
3752 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3753 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3754 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3755 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3756 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3757 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3758
3759 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3760 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3761 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3762 the end patterns.
3763
3764 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3765 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3766 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3767
3768 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3769 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3770 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3771 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3772
3773 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3774 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3775 work: >
3776 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3777 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3778< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3779 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3780 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3781 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3782 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3783< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3784 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3785
3786 *:syn-keepend*
3787 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3788 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3789 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3790 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3791 { starts outer "{}" region
3792 { starts contained "{}" region
3793 } ends contained "{}" region
3794 } ends outer "{} region
3795 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3796 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3797 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3798 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3799 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3800 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3801 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3802< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3803 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3804
3805 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3806 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3807 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3808 contained matches.
3809 *:syn-extend*
3810 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3811 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3812 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3813 extended.
3814 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3815 others don't. Example: >
3816
3817 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3818 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3819 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3820
3821< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3822 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3823 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3824
3825 Another example: >
3826 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3827< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3828 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3829 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3830 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3831 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3832
3833 *:syn-excludenl*
3834 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3835 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3836 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3837 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3838 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3839 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3840 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3841 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3842 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3843 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3844 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3845 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3846 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3847
3848 *:syn-matchgroup*
3849 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3850 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3851 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3852< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3853 between with the "String" group.
3854 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3855 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3856 using a matchgroup.
3857
3858 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3859 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3860 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3861 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3862 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3863
3864 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3865 different colors: >
3866 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3867 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3868 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3869 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3870 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3871 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003872<
3873 *E849*
3874The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003875
3876==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010038777. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003878
3879The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
3880The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
3881and may be mixed with patterns.
3882
3883Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
3884can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02003885 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003886 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
3887:syntax keyword - - - - - -
3888:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
3889:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003890
3891These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003892 conceal
3893 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003894 contained
3895 containedin
3896 nextgroup
3897 transparent
3898 skipwhite
3899 skipnl
3900 skipempty
3901
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003902conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
3903
3904When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02003905Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02003906'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
3907concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
3908edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02003909Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003910
3911concealends *:syn-concealends*
3912
3913When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
3914the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
3915Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
3916'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
3917in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
3918
3919cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003920 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003921The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
3922when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
3923argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003924character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
3925a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003926 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02003927See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003928
3929contained *:syn-contained*
3930
3931When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
3932the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
3933another match. Example: >
3934 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
3935 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
3936
3937
3938display *:syn-display*
3939
3940If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
3941detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
3942by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
3943to be displayed.
3944
3945Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
3946conditions:
3947- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
3948 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
3949 line.
3950- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
3951 make it continue on the next line.
3952- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
3953 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
3954 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
3955- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
3956 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
3957 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
3958 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
3959
3960Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
3961- match with a number
3962- match with a label
3963
3964
3965transparent *:syn-transparent*
3966
3967If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
3968itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
3969is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
3970only to skip over a part of the text.
3971
3972The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
3973unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
3974avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
3975highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
3976 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
3977 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
3978 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
3979 :hi link myString String
3980 :hi link myWord Comment
3981Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
3982match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
3983argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
3984it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
3985out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
3986"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This
3987happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
3988position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
3989
3990When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
3991items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
3992see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
3993through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
3994
3995 look from here
3996
3997 | | | | | |
3998 V V V V V V
3999
4000 xxxx yyy more contained items
4001 .................... contained item (transparent)
4002 ============================= first item
4003
4004The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4005transparent group.
4006
4007What you see is:
4008
4009 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4010
4011Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4012
4013
4014oneline *:syn-oneline*
4015
4016The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4017boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4018region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4019the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4020continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4021line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4022
4023When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4024pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4025end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4026means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4027be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4028line break.
4029
4030
4031fold *:syn-fold*
4032
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004033The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004034Example: >
4035 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4036 :syn sync fromstart
4037 :set foldmethod=syntax
4038This will make each {} block form one fold.
4039
4040The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4041ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4042The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
4043{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4044
4045
4046 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004047contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004048
4049The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4050groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4051containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4052regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4053this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4054here.
4055
4056contains=ALL
4057 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4058 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4059
4060contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4061 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4062 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4063 are listed. Example: >
4064 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4065
4066contains=TOP
4067 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4068 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4069 argument.
4070contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4071 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4072
4073contains=CONTAINED
4074 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4075 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4076 argument.
4077contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4078 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4079 listed.
4080
4081
4082The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4083that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4084The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4085 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4086The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4087that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4088command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4089syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4090the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4091group names.
4092
4093The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4094region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4095|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4096region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4097area that is highlighted
4098
4099
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004100containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004101
4102The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4103item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4104containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4105
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004106The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004107
4108This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4109be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4110of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4111the C syntax: >
4112 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4113Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4114level.
4115
4116Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4117appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4118keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4119work.
4120
4121
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004122nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004123
4124The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4125separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4126
4127If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4128tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4129a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4130will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4131current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4132other groups. Example: >
4133 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4134 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4135 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4136
4137This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4138"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4139highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4140
4141 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4142 fff bbb fff bbb
4143
4144Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4145when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4146highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4147would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4148
4149
4150skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4151skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4152skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4153
4154These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4155used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004156 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004157 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4158 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4159
4160When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4161next group that matches the white space.
4162
4163When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4164line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4165line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4166the current item in the same line.
4167
4168When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4169groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4170for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4171space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4172
4173Example: >
4174 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4175 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4176 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4177Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4178match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4179precedence.
4180Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4181"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4182example).
4183
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004184IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4185
4186:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4187 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4188 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4189 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4190 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4191 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4192 given explicitly.
4193
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004194:sy[ntax] conceal
4195 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4196
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004197==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010041988. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004199
4200In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4201characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4202use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4203use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4204 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4205 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4206
4207See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004208always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004209value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4210not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4211independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4212
4213Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4214This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4215
4216 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4217The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4218change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4219match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4220are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4221pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4222
4223The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4224The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4225
4226ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4227me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4228hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4229he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4230rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4231re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4232lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4233
4234The {offset} can be:
4235
4236s start of the matched pattern
4237s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4238s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4239e end of the matched pattern
4240e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4241e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004242{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004243
4244Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4245
4246Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4247meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4248
4249 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4250match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4251region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4252region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4253region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4254
4255Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4256 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4257<
4258 some "string" text
4259 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4260
4261Notes:
4262- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4263 offset(s).
4264- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4265- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4266 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004267- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
4268 This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the
4269 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004270- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4271 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4272 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4273
4274Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4275 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4276<
4277 /* this is a comment */
4278 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4279
4280A more complicated Example: >
4281 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4282<
4283 abcfoostringbarabc
4284 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004285 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004286
4287Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4288
4289Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4290with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4291in the pattern.
4292
4293The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4294be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4295cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4296characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4297used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4298specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4299
4300 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4301 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4302 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4303<
4304 ___zzzz ___wwww
4305 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4306 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4307 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4308
4309The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4310unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4311
4312
4313Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4314
4315The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4316expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4317
4318When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4319allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004320following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4321the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004322
4323The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4324continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4325matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4326halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4327previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4328is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4329 x x a
4330 b x x
4331Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4332after the "\n".
4333
4334
4335External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4336
4337These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4338
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004339 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004340 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4341 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4342 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004343
4344 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4345 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4346 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4347 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4348
4349Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4350sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4351shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4352items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4353referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4354example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4355 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4356
4357As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4358it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004359changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004360first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4361also be used in skip patterns: >
4362 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4363
4364Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4365indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4366to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4367Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4368within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4369sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4370the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4371
4372Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4373cannot be referred to.
4374
4375==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043769. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004377
4378:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4379 [add={group-name}..]
4380 [remove={group-name}..]
4381
4382This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4383single name.
4384
4385 contains={group-name}..
4386 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4387 add={group-name}..
4388 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4389 remove={group-name}..
4390 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4391
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004392A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4393nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4394this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004395
4396Example: >
4397 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4398 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4399
4400As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4401retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4402to speak: >
4403 :syntax keyword A aaa
4404 :syntax keyword B bbb
4405 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4406 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4407 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4408
4409This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4410 :syntax keyword A aaa
4411 :syntax keyword B bbb
4412 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4413 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4414 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4415 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4416 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004417<
4418 *E848*
4419The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004420
4421==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100442210. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004423
4424It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4425a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4426two different ways:
4427
4428 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4429 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4430 the |:runtime| command: >
4431
4432 " In cpp.vim:
4433 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4434 :unlet b:current_syntax
4435
4436< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4437 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4438 ":syntax include" command:
4439
4440:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4441
4442 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4443 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4444 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4445 that list. >
4446
4447 " In perl.vim:
4448 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4449 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4450<
4451 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4452 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4453 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4454 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4455 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
4456 with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn
4457 include".
4458
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004459 *E847*
4460The maximum number of includes is 999.
4461
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004462==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100446311. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004464
4465Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4466make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4467redrawing starts.
4468
4469:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4470
4471There are four ways to synchronize:
44721. Always parse from the start of the file.
4473 |:syn-sync-first|
44742. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4475 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4476 |:syn-sync-second|
44773. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4478 |:syn-sync-third|
44794. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4480 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4481
4482 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4483For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4484limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4485
4486If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4487that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4488lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4489
4490If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4491for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4492adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4493slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004494 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004495<
4496 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4497When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4498cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4499start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4500the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4501break use this: >
4502 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4503The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4504change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4505value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4506
4507
4508First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4509>
4510 :syntax sync fromstart
4511
4512The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4513accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4514so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004515when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004516case: to the end of the file).
4517
4518Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4519
4520
4521Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4522
4523For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4524Example: >
4525 :syntax sync ccomment
4526
4527When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4528comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4529used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4530An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4531 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4532This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4533used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4534region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4535
4536The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4537lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4538lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4539lines, but it hard to sync on).
4540
4541Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4542that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4543is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4544chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4545is hardly ever noticed.
4546
4547
4548Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4549
4550For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4551Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4552means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4553Example: >
4554 :syntax sync minlines=50
4555
4556"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4557
4558
4559Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4560
4561The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4562sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4563region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4564starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4565the search continues backwards in the file.
4566
4567This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4568matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4569- Keywords cannot be used.
4570- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4571 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4572- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4573 forwards.
4574- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4575 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4576 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
4577 consecutive that contain the continuation pattern.
4578- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4579 group of continued lines).
4580- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4581 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4582 line (or group of continued lines).
4583- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4584 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4585 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4586 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4587
4588There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
45891. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4590 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4591 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4592 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
45932. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4594 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4595 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4596 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4597Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4598
4599Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4600avoid finding unwanted matches.
4601
4602[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4603search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4604highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4605faster.]
4606
4607 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4608 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4609
4610 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4611 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4612 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4613 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4614 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4615
4616 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4617 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4618
4619 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4620 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4621 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4622 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4623 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4624 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4625 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4626 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4627 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4628 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4629
4630 :syntax sync match ..
4631 :syntax sync region ..
4632
4633 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4634 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4635
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004636 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004637 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4638
4639 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4640 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4641 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4642
4643If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4644searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4645few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4646 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4647
4648You can clear all sync settings with: >
4649 :syntax sync clear
4650
4651You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4652 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4653
4654==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100465512. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004656
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004657This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004658
4659 :sy[ntax] [list]
4660
4661To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4662
4663 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4664
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004665To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004666
4667 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4668
4669See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4670
4671Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4672is mostly used, because it looks better.
4673
4674==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100467513. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004676
4677There are three types of highlight groups:
4678- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4679 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4680 linked to a group of the second type.
4681- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4682- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4683 *hitest.vim*
4684You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4685 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4686This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4687in their own color.
4688
4689 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004690:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4691 This is basically the same as >
4692 :echo g:colors_name
4693< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4694 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4695 feature it will output "unknown".
4696
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004697:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004698 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004699 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004700 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4701 "start" and then under "opt".
4702
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004703 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004704 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004705
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004706 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004707 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004708 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004709 runtime colors/evening.vim
4710 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4711
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004712< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4713 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4714 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004715 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004716 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004717 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004718
4719:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4720 attributes set.
4721
4722:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4723 List one highlight group.
4724
4725:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4726 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4727 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4728 default colors to use.
4729
4730:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4731:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4732 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4733 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4734
4735:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4736 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4737 an existing group.
4738 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4739 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4740 argument.
4741
4742Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4743default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4744highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4745values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4746the default value.
4747
4748A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4749a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4750
4751 :hi Comment gui=bold
4752
4753Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4754specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4755result is like this single command has been used: >
4756 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4757<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004758 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004759When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4760also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4761 :verbose hi Comment
4762< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004763 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004764
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004765When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4766mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004767
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004768 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4769There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4770term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
4771cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
4772 termcap entry)
4773gui the GUI
4774
4775For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4776the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4777
47781. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4779
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004780 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4781 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004782 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004783term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4784 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4785 following items (in any order):
4786 bold
4787 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004788 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004789 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004790 reverse
4791 inverse same as reverse
4792 italic
4793 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004794 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004795 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4796
4797 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4798 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004799 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004800 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
4801 is only available in the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004802
4803start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4804stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4805 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4806 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4807
4808 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4809 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4810 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4811 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4812 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4813 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4814 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4815
4816 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4817
4818 1. A string with escape sequences.
4819 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4820 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4821 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4822 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4823
4824 2. A list of terminal codes.
4825 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4826 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4827 White space is not allowed. Example:
4828 start=t_C1,t_BL
4829 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4830
4831
48322. highlight arguments for color terminals
4833
4834cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4835 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4836 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4837 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4838 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004839 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4840 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4841 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004842
4843ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4844ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
4845 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4846 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4847 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4848 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4849 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4850 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4851
4852 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4853 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4854 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4855 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4856 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
4857
4858 The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these
4859 have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11
4860 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
4861 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
4862 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
4863
4864 *cterm-colors*
4865 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
4866 0 0 Black
4867 1 4 DarkBlue
4868 2 2 DarkGreen
4869 3 6 DarkCyan
4870 4 1 DarkRed
4871 5 5 DarkMagenta
4872 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
4873 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
4874 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
4875 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
4876 10 2* Green, LightGreen
4877 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
4878 12 1* Red, LightRed
4879 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
4880 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
4881 15 7* White
4882
4883 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
4884 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
4885 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
4886 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
4887 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
4888 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
4889 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
4890 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
4891 a number instead of a color name.
4892
4893 The case of the color names is ignored.
4894 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00004895 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004896 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
4897
4898 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
4899 colors!
4900
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01004901 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
4902
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004903 *:hi-normal-cterm*
4904 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
4905 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
4906 Example: >
4907 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
4908< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02004909 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
4910 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
4911 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
4912 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
4913 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004914 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004915 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004916 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004917
4918 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
4919 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
4920 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
4921 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
4922 *E419* *E420*
4923 When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and
4924 "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the
4925 colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for
4926 reverse video: >
4927 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
4928< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
4929 command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
4930 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
4931
4932
49333. highlight arguments for the GUI
4934
4935gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
4936 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
4937 See |attr-list| for a description.
4938 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4939 have the same effect.
4940 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
4941
4942font={font-name} *highlight-font*
4943 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
4944 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
4945 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
4946<
4947 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
4948 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
4949 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
4950 used).
4951 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
4952 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
4953 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
4954 changed.
4955 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
4956 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
4957 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02004958 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
4959 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
4960 Example: >
4961 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004962
4963guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
4964guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004965guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
4966 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004967 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
4968 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00004969 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004970 NONE no color (transparent)
4971 bg use normal background color
4972 background use normal background color
4973 fg use normal foreground color
4974 foreground use normal foreground color
4975 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
4976 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
4977 Example: >
4978 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
4979<
4980 *gui-colors*
4981 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
4982 Red LightRed DarkRed
4983 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
4984 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
4985 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
4986 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
4987 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
4988 Gray LightGray DarkGray
4989 Black White
4990 Orange Purple Violet
4991
4992 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
4993 |win32-colors|.
4994
4995 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
4996 The format is "#rrggbb", where
4997 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004998 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004999 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005000 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5001 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5002<
5003 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5004These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5005'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5006of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5007command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005008 *hl-ColorColumn*
5009ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005010 *hl-Conceal*
5011Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5012 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005013 *hl-Cursor*
5014Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005015lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5016 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005017 *hl-CursorIM*
5018CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005019 *hl-CursorColumn*
5020CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5021 set
5022 *hl-CursorLine*
5023CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5024 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005025 *hl-Directory*
5026Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5027 *hl-DiffAdd*
5028DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5029 *hl-DiffChange*
5030DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5031 *hl-DiffDelete*
5032DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5033 *hl-DiffText*
5034DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005035 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005036EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5037 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005038 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5039ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5040 *hl-VertSplit*
5041VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5042 *hl-Folded*
5043Folded line used for closed folds
5044 *hl-FoldColumn*
5045FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5046 *hl-SignColumn*
5047SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5048 *hl-IncSearch*
5049IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5050 ":s///c"
5051 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005052LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005053 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005054 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005055CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5056 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005057 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005058 *hl-MatchParen*
5059MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5060 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5061
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005062 *hl-ModeMsg*
5063ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5064 *hl-MoreMsg*
5065MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5066 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005067NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5068 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5069 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5070 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005071 *hl-Normal*
5072Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005073 *hl-Pmenu*
5074Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5075 *hl-PmenuSel*
5076PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5077 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5078PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5079 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5080PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005081 *hl-Question*
5082Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005083 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5084QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005085 *hl-Search*
5086Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005087 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005088 *hl-SpecialKey*
5089SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5090 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5091 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5092 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005093 *hl-SpellBad*
5094SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5095 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005096 *hl-SpellCap*
5097SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5098 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005099 *hl-SpellLocal*
5100SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5101 used in another region. |spell|
5102 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5103 *hl-SpellRare*
5104SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5105 hardly ever used. |spell|
5106 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005107 *hl-StatusLine*
5108StatusLine status line of current window
5109 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5110StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5111 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5112 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005113 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5114StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5115 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5116StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5117 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005118 *hl-TabLine*
5119TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5120 *hl-TabLineFill*
5121TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5122 *hl-TabLineSel*
5123TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005124 *hl-Terminal*
5125Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005126 *hl-Title*
5127Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5128 *hl-Visual*
5129Visual Visual mode selection
5130 *hl-VisualNOS*
5131VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5132 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5133 *hl-WarningMsg*
5134WarningMsg warning messages
5135 *hl-WildMenu*
5136WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5137
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005138 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005139The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005140statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005141
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005142For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005143scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5144Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5145and guifg.
5146
5147 *hl-Menu*
5148Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5149 Also used for the toolbar.
5150 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5151
5152 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5153 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5154 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5155 set.
5156
5157 *hl-Scrollbar*
5158Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5159 scrollbars.
5160 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5161
5162 *hl-Tooltip*
5163Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5164 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5165
5166 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5167 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5168 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5169 set.
5170
5171==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100517214. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005173
5174When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5175can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5176group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5177
5178To set a link:
5179
5180 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5181
5182To remove a link:
5183
5184 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5185
5186Notes: *E414*
5187- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5188 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5189- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5190 removed.
5191- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5192 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5193 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5194 links for groups that already have settings.
5195
5196 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5197The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5198group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5199will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5200
5201Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5202specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5203 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5204If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5205 :highlight link cComment Question
5206Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5207overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5208
5209==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100521015. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005211
5212If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5213command: >
5214 :syntax clear
5215
5216This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5217or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5218in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5219load the syntax file.
5220The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5221loaded after this command.
5222
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005223To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5224 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5225This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5226
5227To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5228 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5229This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5230
5231 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005232If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5233the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5234 :syntax off
5235
5236What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5237 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5238See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5239$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5240
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005241 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5242If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5243defaults back: >
5244
5245 :syntax reset
5246
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005247It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5248affects the highlighting.
5249
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005250This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5251
5252Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5253back to their Vim default.
5254Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5255scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5256
5257What this actually does is: >
5258
5259 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5260 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5261
5262Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5263
5264 *syncolor*
5265If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5266script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5267'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5268the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5269reset" command.
5270
5271For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5272
5273 if &background == "light"
5274 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5275 else
5276 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5277 endif
5278
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005279 *E679*
5280Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5281'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5282endless loop.
5283
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005284Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5285your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5286depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5287
5288 *syntax_cmd*
5289The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5290syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5291 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5292 links are kept
5293 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5294 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5295 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5296 the colors.
5297 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5298 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5299 them.
5300
5301==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100530216. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005303
5304If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5305mappings.
5306
5307 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5308 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5309>
5310 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5311 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5312
5313WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5314memory Vim will consume.
5315
5316Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5317must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5318
5319Put these lines in your Makefile:
5320
5321# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5322types: types.vim
5323types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005324 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005325 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5326 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5327
5328And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5329
5330 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5331 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5332 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5333 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5334 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5335
5336==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100533717. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005338
5339Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5340possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5341private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5342with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5343highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5344italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5345
5346To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5347windows on the buffer: >
5348 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005349< *w:current_syntax*
5350This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5351"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5352restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5353"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5354"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005355Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005356
5357Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005358on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005359syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005360same buffer.
5361
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005362A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5363is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5364When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005365
5366==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100536718. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005368
5369Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5370default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5371 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5372 : if has("terminfo")
5373 : set t_Co=8
5374 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5375 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5376 : else
5377 : set t_Co=8
5378 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5379 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5380 : endif
5381 :endif
5382< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5383
5384You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5385e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5386
5387Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5388be wrong.
5389 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5390The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5391But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5392 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5393 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5394<
5395 *colortest.vim*
5396To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005397To use it, execute this command: >
5398 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005399
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005400Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005401output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5402at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5403colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5404
5405 *xfree-xterm*
5406To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005407included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005408at: >
5409 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5410Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5411termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5412supports. >
5413 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5414If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5415(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5416
5417This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5418 :if has("terminfo")
5419 : set t_Co=16
5420 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5421 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5422 :else
5423 : set t_Co=16
5424 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5425 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5426 :endif
5427< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5428
5429Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5430translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5431Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5432
5433For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5434
5435 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5436 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5437
5438Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5439and try if that works.
5440
5441You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5442 XTerm*color0: #000000
5443 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5444 XTerm*color2: #008000
5445 XTerm*color3: #808000
5446 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5447 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5448 XTerm*color6: #008080
5449 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5450 XTerm*color8: #808080
5451 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5452 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5453 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5454 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5455 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5456 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5457 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5458 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5459
5460[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5461cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005462newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005463
5464To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5465Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5466 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5467<
5468 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5469To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5470Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5471these resources:
5472 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5473 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5474 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5475 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5476
5477 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005478These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005479foreground colors: >
5480 :if has("terminfo")
5481 : set t_Co=8
5482 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5483 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5484 :else
5485 : set t_Co=8
5486 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5487 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5488 :endif
5489< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5490
5491 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5492These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5493emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5494bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5495 :set t_Co=16
5496 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5497 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5498<
5499 *TTpro-telnet*
5500These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5501open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5502 set t_Co=16
5503 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5504 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5505Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5506that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5507(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5508
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005509
5510==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100551119. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005512
5513This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5514
5515If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5516faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5517as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5518
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005519Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5520You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5521
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005522To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5523sequence: >
5524 :syntime on
5525 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5526 :syntime report
5527
5528This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5529it took to match them against the text.
5530
5531:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5532 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5533 matching.
5534
5535:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5536
5537:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5538
5539:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5540 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5541 the output.
5542
5543 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5544 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5545 matching this pattern.
5546 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5547 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5548 matched
5549 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5550 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5551 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5552 this is not unique.
5553 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5554
5555Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5556include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5557pattern does NOT match.
5558
5559When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5560all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5561literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5562
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005563"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005564 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005565"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005566
5567
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005568 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: